1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
Order Today|Dealer-Direct Buy Prices|Delivered + Installed in 48 States

Buy Commercial Metal Buildings Delivered & Installed Starting From $26,485

Steel And Stud is your trusted commercial metal building dealer and steel building contractor. Order pre-engineered metal buildings for business use in any width and length with pricing starting from $26,485 installed. Request metal building pricing, customize your steel building design, and schedule professional steel building installation across 48 states. Get a free quote, compare commercial building packages, or call 1-877-275-7048 to plan your project today.

$26,485
Starting From
100ft
Clear Span Width
20yr
12ga Frame Warranty
48
States Delivered
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 1441–1480 of 2740 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Green metal building equipment shed with open white roll-up door and John Deere zero turn mower

16×20 ATV and Toy Storage

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 ATV and Toy Storage | Steel and Stud, From $4,750

12

16×20 ATV and Toy Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20ATV and Toy Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 ATV and Toy Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of hobby-ready atv and toy storage space. Two ATVs plus a small fishing boat on a trailer fit cleanly with 320 sq ft. The 16-foot width parks them parallel; the 24-foot depth leaves a back wall.

You’re viewing:ATV and Toy Storage·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$3,800
16×20
this size
$4,750
16×24
longer
$5,650
18×20
wider
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • Vertical Roof
  • Anchored Concrete
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-ATV-TOY-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 atv and toy storage.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. 16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of hobby-ready atv and toy storage space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft shop

ATV and Toy Storage layout.

16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of hobby-ready atv and toy storage space. Two ATVs plus a small fishing boat on a trailer fit cleanly with 320 sq ft. The 16-foot width parks them parallel; the 24-foot depth leaves a back wall for gear, life jackets, and a fuel cabinet. A 16×20 roll-up handles trailered loads without tilting masts or windshields.

💡 Pro tip:ATV and Toy Storage works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 ATV and Toy Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your ATV and Toy Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ATV and Toy Storage spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use ATV and Toy Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday atv and toy storage
Everyday atv and toy storage
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a atv and toy storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWatv and toy storage + seasonal storage
atv and toy storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 ATV and Toy Storage, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 atv and toy storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from ATV and Toy Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 ATV and Toy Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 ATV and Toy Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your ATV and Toy Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose ATV and Toy Storage also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

ATV and Toy Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 atv and toy storage cost?

A 16×20 atv and toy storage from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 atv and toy storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud atv and toy storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 atv and toy storage?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud atv and toy storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 atv and toy storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 atv and toy storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 atv and toy storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 atv and toy storage.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 atv and toy storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 atv and toy storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 16×20 atv and toy storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a atv and toy storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your ATV and Toy Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal building equipment shed with open white roll-up door and John Deere zero turn mower

16×20 ATV and Toy Storage

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

16×20 Motorcycle & ATV Barn

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×20 Motorcycle & ATV Barn | Steel and Stud — From $4,750
12
16×20 Motorcycle & ATV Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings16×20Motorcycle & ATV Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Motorcycle & ATV Barn, built for hobby and recreational use.

Fits three to four motorcycles or two side-by-side ATVs with a workbench and parts cabinet. A 16×20 roll-up door lets a UTV roll straight in without ducking the windshield.

You're viewing:Motorcycle & ATV Barn·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×20
this size
$4,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-MOTORCYCLE-ATV-BBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your utility farm barn.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Sliding door + man door combination. Fits three to four motorcycles or two side-by-side ATVs with a workbench and parts cabinet.

Stock / storage bayFeed + supply cornerWalk-in tool area16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft · utility farm barn

Stock / storage bay · Feed + supply corner · Walk-in tool area

Stock / storage bay at the front, feed + supply corner in the middle, walk-in tool area at the rear. Capacity: multi-use farm storage. A 16×20 roll-up door lets a UTV roll straight in without ducking the windshield.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: lean-to, loft joists.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Motorcycle & ATV Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle & ATV Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle & ATV Barn spec sheet.

Width16'
Length20' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle & ATV Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle & atv barn
Everyday motorcycle & atv barn
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle & atv barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle & atv barn + seasonal storage
motorcycle & atv barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Motorcycle & ATV Barn — what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle & ATV Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Motorcycle & ATV Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Motorcycle & ATV Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Motorcycle & ATV Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle & ATV Barn also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage →
🏡 16×20

Backyard 16x20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16x20 metal shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Backyard 16x20 Metal Shed →
🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →
🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →
🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Feed & Tack Storage →
🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →
🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle & ATV Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn cost?

A 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud motorcycle & atv barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle & atv barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a motorcycle & atv barn to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle & ATV Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

16×20 Motorcycle & ATV Barn

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×20 Motorcycle & ATV Barn | Steel and Stud — From $4,750
12
16×20 Motorcycle & ATV Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings16×20Motorcycle & ATV Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Motorcycle & ATV Barn, built for hobby and recreational use.

Fits three to four motorcycles or two side-by-side ATVs with a workbench and parts cabinet. A 16×20 roll-up door lets a UTV roll straight in without ducking the windshield.

You're viewing:Motorcycle & ATV Barn·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×20
this size
$4,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-MOTORCYCLE-ATV-BBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your utility farm barn.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Sliding door + man door combination. Fits three to four motorcycles or two side-by-side ATVs with a workbench and parts cabinet.

Stock / storage bayFeed + supply cornerWalk-in tool area16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft · utility farm barn

Stock / storage bay · Feed + supply corner · Walk-in tool area

Stock / storage bay at the front, feed + supply corner in the middle, walk-in tool area at the rear. Capacity: multi-use farm storage. A 16×20 roll-up door lets a UTV roll straight in without ducking the windshield.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: lean-to, loft joists.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Motorcycle & ATV Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle & ATV Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle & ATV Barn spec sheet.

Width16'
Length20' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle & ATV Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle & atv barn
Everyday motorcycle & atv barn
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle & atv barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle & atv barn + seasonal storage
motorcycle & atv barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Motorcycle & ATV Barn — what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle & ATV Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Motorcycle & ATV Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Motorcycle & ATV Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Motorcycle & ATV Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle & ATV Barn also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage →
🏡 16×20

Backyard 16x20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16x20 metal shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Backyard 16x20 Metal Shed →
🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →
🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →
🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Feed & Tack Storage →
🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →
🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle & ATV Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn cost?

A 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud motorcycle & atv barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle & atv barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 16×20 motorcycle & atv barn for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a motorcycle & atv barn to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle & ATV Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

16×20 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×20 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage | Steel and Stud — From $4,750
12
16×20 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings16×201-Car 16x20 Metal Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage, built for daily backyard use.

The 16×20 is the standard single-car garage footprint — room for a full-size sedan or mid-size pickup with three feet of clearance on both sides. Most orders pair a 16×20 roll-up door on the 16 ft gable end with a 16×20.

You're viewing:1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×20
this size
$4,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-1-CAR-16X20-METABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your single-car garage.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. 9-ft roll-up fits full-size truck. The 16×20 is the standard single-car garage footprint — room for a full-size sedan or mid-size pickup with three feet of clearance on both sides.

Vehicle bayWorkbench wallStorage shelf16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft · single-car garage

Vehicle bay · Workbench wall · Storage shelf

Vehicle bay at the front, workbench wall in the middle, storage shelf at the rear. Capacity: 1 vehicle + workbench. Most orders pair a 16×20 roll-up door on the 16 ft gable end with a 16×20 walk door on the side.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: workbench, shelving.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage spec sheet.

Width16'
Length20' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday 1-car 16x20 metal garage
Everyday 1-car 16x20 metal garage
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a 1-car 16x20 metal garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOW1-car 16x20 metal garage + seasonal storage
1-car 16x20 metal garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage — what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage also viewed:

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16x20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16x20 metal shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Backyard 16x20 Metal Shed →
🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →
🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →
🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →
🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Feed & Tack Storage →
🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →
🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage cost?

A 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud 1-car 16x20 metal garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud 1-car 16x20 metal garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage typically adds $2,560–$3,840 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

16×20 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×20 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage | Steel and Stud — From $4,750
12
16×20 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings16×201-Car 16x20 Metal Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage, built for daily backyard use.

The 16×20 is the standard single-car garage footprint — room for a full-size sedan or mid-size pickup with three feet of clearance on both sides. Most orders pair a 16×20 roll-up door on the 16 ft gable end with a 16×20.

You're viewing:1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×20
this size
$4,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-1-CAR-16X20-METABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your single-car garage.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. 9-ft roll-up fits full-size truck. The 16×20 is the standard single-car garage footprint — room for a full-size sedan or mid-size pickup with three feet of clearance on both sides.

Vehicle bayWorkbench wallStorage shelf16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft · single-car garage

Vehicle bay · Workbench wall · Storage shelf

Vehicle bay at the front, workbench wall in the middle, storage shelf at the rear. Capacity: 1 vehicle + workbench. Most orders pair a 16×20 roll-up door on the 16 ft gable end with a 16×20 walk door on the side.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: workbench, shelving.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage spec sheet.

Width16'
Length20' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday 1-car 16x20 metal garage
Everyday 1-car 16x20 metal garage
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a 1-car 16x20 metal garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOW1-car 16x20 metal garage + seasonal storage
1-car 16x20 metal garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage — what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage also viewed:

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16x20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16x20 metal shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Backyard 16x20 Metal Shed →
🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →
🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →
🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →
🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Feed & Tack Storage →
🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →
🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage cost?

A 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud 1-car 16x20 metal garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud 1-car 16x20 metal garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage typically adds $2,560–$3,840 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

16×20 Small Business Overflow Storage

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×20 Small Business Overflow Storage | Steel and Stud — From $6,600
12
16×20 Small Business Overflow Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,500$6,600SAVE $900
or $138/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings16×20Small Business Overflow Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Small Business Overflow Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Retailers, landscapers, and e-commerce sellers park inventory, seasonal displays, or a box truck inside a 16×20. The footprint stays below the commercial accessory-building permit threshold in most zoning codes.

You're viewing:Small Business Overflow Storage·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,600$7,500Save $900
or as low as $138/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×20
this size
$6,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-SMALL-BUSINESS-OBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your office pod.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Insulated, mini-split, cat-6 pre-wire. Retailers, landscapers, and e-commerce sellers park inventory, seasonal displays, or a box truck inside a 16×20.

Desk zoneMeeting / client chairSTORAGE + PRINTER WALL16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft · office pod

Desk zone · Meeting / client chair · Storage + printer wall

Desk zone at the front, meeting / client chair in the middle, storage + printer wall at the rear. Capacity: 1-2 person office. The footprint stays below the commercial accessory-building permit threshold in most zoning codes.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: glass entry door, built-in desk wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Small Business Overflow Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Business Overflow Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Business Overflow Storage spec sheet.

Width16'
Length20' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Business Overflow Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday small business overflow storage
Everyday small business overflow storage
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small business overflow storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall business overflow storage + seasonal storage
small business overflow storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Small Business Overflow Storage — what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$138/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 small business overflow storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $138/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Business Overflow Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Small Business Overflow Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Small Business Overflow Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Business Overflow Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Business Overflow Storage also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage →
🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Workshop →
🏡 16×20

Backyard 16x20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16x20 metal shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Backyard 16x20 Metal Shed →
🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →
🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →
🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →
🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →
🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Feed & Tack Storage →
🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →
🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport →
🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Business Overflow Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 small business overflow storage cost?

A 16×20 small business overflow storage from Steel and Stud starts at $6,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $138/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 small business overflow storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud small business overflow storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 small business overflow storage?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small business overflow storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 small business overflow storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 small business overflow storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 small business overflow storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $138/month on a 16×20 small business overflow storage.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 small business overflow storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 small business overflow storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 16×20 small business overflow storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Small Business Overflow Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$6,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

16×20 Small Business Overflow Storage

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×20 Small Business Overflow Storage | Steel and Stud — From $6,600
12
16×20 Small Business Overflow Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,500$6,600SAVE $900
or $138/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings16×20Small Business Overflow Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Small Business Overflow Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Retailers, landscapers, and e-commerce sellers park inventory, seasonal displays, or a box truck inside a 16×20. The footprint stays below the commercial accessory-building permit threshold in most zoning codes.

You're viewing:Small Business Overflow Storage·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,600$7,500Save $900
or as low as $138/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×20
this size
$6,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-SMALL-BUSINESS-OBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your office pod.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Insulated, mini-split, cat-6 pre-wire. Retailers, landscapers, and e-commerce sellers park inventory, seasonal displays, or a box truck inside a 16×20.

Desk zoneMeeting / client chairSTORAGE + PRINTER WALL16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft · office pod

Desk zone · Meeting / client chair · Storage + printer wall

Desk zone at the front, meeting / client chair in the middle, storage + printer wall at the rear. Capacity: 1-2 person office. The footprint stays below the commercial accessory-building permit threshold in most zoning codes.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: glass entry door, built-in desk wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Small Business Overflow Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Business Overflow Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Business Overflow Storage spec sheet.

Width16'
Length20' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Business Overflow Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday small business overflow storage
Everyday small business overflow storage
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small business overflow storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall business overflow storage + seasonal storage
small business overflow storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Small Business Overflow Storage — what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$138/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 small business overflow storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $138/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Business Overflow Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Small Business Overflow Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Small Business Overflow Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Business Overflow Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Business Overflow Storage also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16x20 metal garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize 1-Car 16x20 Metal Garage →
🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Workshop →
🏡 16×20

Backyard 16x20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16x20 metal shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Backyard 16x20 Metal Shed →
🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →
🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →
🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →
🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →
🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Feed & Tack Storage →
🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →
🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport →
🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Business Overflow Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 small business overflow storage cost?

A 16×20 small business overflow storage from Steel and Stud starts at $6,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $138/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 small business overflow storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud small business overflow storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 small business overflow storage?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small business overflow storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 small business overflow storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 small business overflow storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 small business overflow storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $138/month on a 16×20 small business overflow storage.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 small business overflow storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 small business overflow storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 16×20 small business overflow storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Small Business Overflow Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal workshop at twilight with open roll-up door revealing a lit steel garage work area

18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench | Steel and Stud, From $9,300

12

18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench, built for daily backyard use.

Our 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners pick the 18×35 when a basic 18×35 feels cramped.

You’re viewing:Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$7,450
18×35
this size
$9,300
18×36
longer
$9,550
20×35
wider
$10,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 9×8 Roll-Up Door
  • Fits Full-Size Truck
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-SINGLE-CAR-GARAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Our 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench layout.

Our 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners pick the 18×35 when a basic 18×35 feels cramped and a 18×35 feels excessive. You park one full-size F-150 or SUV, then keep the back 8 feet for a workbench, tool wall, and a small parts shelf. Plenty of room to walk around the truck with the doors open.

💡 Pro tip:Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench.

DAILY USEEveryday single-car garage with workshop bench
Everyday single-car garage with workshop bench
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-car garage with workshop bench.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-car garage with workshop bench + seasonal storage
single-car garage with workshop bench + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench cost?

A 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-car garage with workshop bench ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-car garage with workshop bench different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench typically adds $5,040–$7,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal workshop at twilight with open roll-up door revealing a lit steel garage work area

18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal workshop with copper roof, brown wainscoting and roll-up door in sunset hills

18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists | Steel and Stud, From $9,300

12

18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists? At 630 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Woodworkers, leather crafters, and small-engine hobbyists buy this size for a.

You’re viewing:Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$7,450
18×35
this size
$9,300
18×36
longer
$9,550
20×35
wider
$10,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Hobbyist Favorite
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-BACKYARD-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Looking for a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists? At 630 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists layout.

Looking for a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists? At 630 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Woodworkers, leather crafters, and small-engine hobbyists buy this size for a dedicated shop separate from the house. 630 sq ft handles a table saw, drill press, router table, dust collection, and a 6-foot workbench with shelving overhead. A 36-inch walk-in door keeps deliveries clean.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard workshop for hobbyists
Everyday backyard workshop for hobbyists
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard workshop for hobbyists.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard workshop for hobbyists + seasonal storage
backyard workshop for hobbyists + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists cost?

A 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard workshop for hobbyists ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard workshop for hobbyists different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists typically adds $5,040–$7,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal workshop with copper roof, brown wainscoting and roll-up door in sunset hills

18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red steel building with black wainscot, roll-up door and glowing windows at dusk

18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side | Steel and Stud, From $9,300

12

18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side, built for daily backyard use.

Our 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Two compact sedans or a small SUV plus a sedan fit at 18 feet.

You’re viewing:Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$7,450
18×35
this size
$9,300
18×36
longer
$9,550
20×35
wider
$10,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 16′ Wide Roll-Up
  • Two-Car Capable
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-TWO-COMPACT-CARSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Our 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side layout.

Our 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Two compact sedans or a small SUV plus a sedan fit at 18 feet wide if you’re careful with the doors. Most buyers pair this with a single 16-foot roll-up door for both bays. You won’t have room for storage along the walls, but you will get both cars under steel.

💡 Pro tip:Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side.

DAILY USEEveryday two compact cars tucked side-by-side
Everyday two compact cars tucked side-by-side
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two compact cars tucked side-by-side.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo compact cars tucked side-by-side + seasonal storage
two compact cars tucked side-by-side + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side cost?

A 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two compact cars tucked side-by-side ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two compact cars tucked side-by-side different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side typically adds $5,040–$7,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel building with black wainscot, roll-up door and glowing windows at dusk

18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Dark green metal shed studio at evening with string lights and wreath on french doors

18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $9,300

12

18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Home Office and Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room, built for daily backyard use.

Our 18×35 home office and hobby room fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Remote workers and small property owners convert the 18×35 into a fully.

You’re viewing:Home Office and Hobby Room·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$7,450
18×35
this size
$9,300
18×36
longer
$9,550
20×35
wider
$10,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Mini-Split Ready
  • Detached Office
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-HOME-OFFICE-HOBBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 home office and hobby room.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Our 18×35 home office and hobby room fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft

Home Office and Hobby Room layout.

Our 18×35 home office and hobby room fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Remote workers and small property owners convert the 18×35 into a fully insulated detached office. R-19 fiberglass batt insulation, a mini-split HVAC unit, and a partition wall give you a 18×35 office plus a 18×35 hobby space. Storefront windows let in natural light.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office and Hobby Room works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office and Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office and Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office and Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday home office and hobby room
Everyday home office and hobby room
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office and hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office and hobby room + seasonal storage
home office and hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 home office and hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office and Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office and Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office and Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office and Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 home office and hobby room cost?

A 18×35 home office and hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 home office and hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office and hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 home office and hobby room?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office and hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 home office and hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 home office and hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 home office and hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 18×35 home office and hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 home office and hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 home office and hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×35 home office and hobby room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×35 home office and hobby room typically adds $5,040–$7,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office and Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Dark green metal shed studio at evening with string lights and wreath on french doors

18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black metal carport with cream trim sheltering a silver pickup and UTV near mountains

18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $9,950

12

18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,350$9,950SAVE $1,400
or $207/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of rugged atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage space. Gardeners and rural property owners use the 18×35 as a dedicated equipment shed. You’ll fit a zero-turn mower, two ATVs, a small utility.

You’re viewing:ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,950$11,350Save $1,400
or as low as $207/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$8,100
18×35
this size
$9,950
18×36
longer
$10,200
20×35
wider
$11,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up Door
  • Gravel Anchors OK
  • Rural Workhorse
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-ATV-MOWER-LAWN-EBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. 18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of rugged atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft shop

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage layout.

18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of rugged atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage space. Gardeners and rural property owners use the 18×35 as a dedicated equipment shed. You’ll fit a zero-turn mower, two ATVs, a small utility trailer, plus shelving for fuel cans, blowers, trimmers, and chainsaws. A double-wide barn door makes loading and unloading fast.

💡 Pro tip:ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage
Everyday atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWatv, mower, and lawn equipment storage + seasonal storage
atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$207/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $207/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage cost?

A 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $207/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $207/month on a 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black metal carport with cream trim sheltering a silver pickup and UTV near mountains

18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop with white roll up door and contractor pickup on gravel drive

18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage | Steel and Stud, From $9,950

12

18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,350$9,950SAVE $1,400
or $207/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of rugged tractor shed with implement storage space. Small-farm owners pick the taller 12-14′ leg height to clear a compact tractor with a front-end loader raised. 630 sq ft holds the tractor.

You’re viewing:Tractor Shed with Implement Storage·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,950$11,350Save $1,400
or as low as $207/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$8,100
18×35
this size
$9,950
18×36
longer
$10,200
20×35
wider
$11,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • Tractor Clearance
  • Lean-To Compatible
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-TRACTOR-SHED-IMPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. 18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of rugged tractor shed with implement storage space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft shop

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage layout.

18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of rugged tractor shed with implement storage space. Small-farm owners pick the taller 12-14′ leg height to clear a compact tractor with a front-end loader raised. 630 sq ft holds the tractor plus a brush hog, box blade, and tiller along the back wall. Optional lean-to adds outdoor covered space for round bales.

💡 Pro tip:Tractor Shed with Implement Storage works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tractor Shed with Implement Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tractor Shed with Implement Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday tractor shed with implement storage
Everyday tractor shed with implement storage
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tractor shed with implement storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtractor shed with implement storage + seasonal storage
tractor shed with implement storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$207/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $207/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tractor Shed with Implement Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tractor Shed with Implement Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tractor Shed with Implement Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage cost?

A 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $207/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tractor shed with implement storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tractor shed with implement storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $207/month on a 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Tractor Shed with Implement Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop with white roll up door and contractor pickup on gravel drive

18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red steel building auto detailing shop with black sedan in the open bay

18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom | Steel and Stud, From $9,300

12

18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom, built for hobby and recreational use.

18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of hobby-ready collector car and motorcycle showroom space. The narrow 18′ width keeps the build affordable while the 28′ length leaves space for a lift, compressor, and tool chest behind the.

You’re viewing:Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$7,450
18×35
this size
$9,300
18×36
longer
$9,550
20×35
wider
$10,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated Walls
  • Collector-Grade
  • Polished Concrete OK
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-COLLECTOR-CAR-MOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. 18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of hobby-ready collector car and motorcycle showroom space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom layout.

18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of hobby-ready collector car and motorcycle showroom space. The narrow 18′ width keeps the build affordable while the 28′ length leaves space for a lift, compressor, and tool chest behind the vehicle.

💡 Pro tip:Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday collector car and motorcycle showroom
Everyday collector car and motorcycle showroom
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a collector car and motorcycle showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcollector car and motorcycle showroom + seasonal storage
collector car and motorcycle showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom cost?

A 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud collector car and motorcycle showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud collector car and motorcycle showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a collector car and motorcycle showroom to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red steel building auto detailing shop with black sedan in the open bay

18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black commercial metal building with full glass storefront fronting a paved parking lot

18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage | Steel and Stud, From $11,150

12

18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,700$11,150SAVE $1,550
or $232/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Small Business Inventory Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 18×35 small business inventory storage? At 630 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. E-commerce sellers and tradespeople buy the 18×35 as a dedicated stock room separate.

You’re viewing:Small Business Inventory Storage·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,150$12,700Save $1,550
or as low as $232/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$9,300
18×35
this size
$11,150
18×36
longer
$11,400
20×35
wider
$12,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • 12 Pallet Spots
  • 12′ Legs
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-SMALL-BUSINESS-IBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 small business inventory storage.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Looking for a 18×35 small business inventory storage? At 630 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft

Small Business Inventory Storage layout.

Looking for a 18×35 small business inventory storage? At 630 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. E-commerce sellers and tradespeople buy the 18×35 as a dedicated stock room separate from the house. 630 sq ft holds 12 pallet positions on the floor or 24 with steel shelving. A 18×35 roll-up door clears a pallet jack and the height accepts standard 48-inch pallets stacked two-high.

💡 Pro tip:Small Business Inventory Storage works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Business Inventory Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Business Inventory Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Business Inventory Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday small business inventory storage
Everyday small business inventory storage
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small business inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall business inventory storage + seasonal storage
small business inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$232/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 small business inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $232/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Business Inventory Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Business Inventory Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Business Inventory Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Business Inventory Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 small business inventory storage cost?

A 18×35 small business inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $232/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 small business inventory storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud small business inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 small business inventory storage?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small business inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 small business inventory storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 small business inventory storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 small business inventory storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $232/month on a 18×35 small business inventory storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 small business inventory storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 small business inventory storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 18×35 small business inventory storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Small Business Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black commercial metal building with full glass storefront fronting a paved parking lot

18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
18x35 metal building: primary product hero render (630 sq ft, proportion-matched from 30×60 source) from Steel and Stud

18×35 Contractor Storage Shop

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×35 Contractor Storage Shop | Steel and Stud — From $11,150
12
18×35 Contractor Storage Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,700$11,150SAVE $1,550
or $232/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings18×35Contractor Storage Shop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Contractor Storage Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors order the 18×35 prefab metal building as a service-truck home base with locking storage. A 18×35 roll-up clears a box truck or a van with a roof rack. Side wall framed.

You're viewing:Contractor Storage Shop·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,150$12,700Save $1,550
or as low as $232/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×35
this size
$11,150
18×36
longer
$11,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Keypad Entry
  • Framed Openings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-CONTRACTOR-STORABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your jobsite storage layout.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Drive-in door for daily load-in/load-out. Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors order the 18×35 prefab metal building as a service-truck home base with locking storage.

Material racksEQUIPMENT PARKINGSecure tool cage18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft · jobsite storage layout

Material racks · Equipment parking · Secure tool cage

Material racks at the front, equipment parking in the middle, secure tool cage at the rear. Capacity: crew tools + materials + small equipment. A 18×35 roll-up clears a box truck or a van with a roof rack.

💡 Pro tip:IBC Certified. Size affords: tool cage, material racking, site-power panel.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Contractor Storage Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Storage Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Storage Shop spec sheet.

Width18'
Length35' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Storage Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor storage shop
Everyday contractor storage shop
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor storage shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor storage shop + seasonal storage
contractor storage shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Contractor Storage Shop — what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$232/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 contractor storage shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $232/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Storage Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Contractor Storage Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Contractor Storage Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Storage Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Storage Shop also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →
🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Workshop →
🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →
🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →
🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →
🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Carport with Storage Room →
🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →
🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Toy Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Storage Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 contractor storage shop cost?

A 18×35 contractor storage shop from Steel and Stud starts at $11,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $232/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 contractor storage shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud contractor storage shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 contractor storage shop?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor storage shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 contractor storage shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 contractor storage shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 contractor storage shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $232/month on a 18×35 contractor storage shop.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 contractor storage shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 contractor storage shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 18×35 contractor storage shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Storage Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$11,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
18x35 metal building: primary product hero render (630 sq ft, proportion-matched from 30×60 source) from Steel and Stud

18×35 Contractor Storage Shop

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×35 Contractor Storage Shop | Steel and Stud — From $11,150
12
18×35 Contractor Storage Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,700$11,150SAVE $1,550
or $232/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings18×35Contractor Storage Shop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Contractor Storage Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors order the 18×35 prefab metal building as a service-truck home base with locking storage. A 18×35 roll-up clears a box truck or a van with a roof rack. Side wall framed.

You're viewing:Contractor Storage Shop·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,150$12,700Save $1,550
or as low as $232/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×35
this size
$11,150
18×36
longer
$11,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Keypad Entry
  • Framed Openings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-CONTRACTOR-STORABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your jobsite storage layout.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Drive-in door for daily load-in/load-out. Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors order the 18×35 prefab metal building as a service-truck home base with locking storage.

Material racksEQUIPMENT PARKINGSecure tool cage18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft · jobsite storage layout

Material racks · Equipment parking · Secure tool cage

Material racks at the front, equipment parking in the middle, secure tool cage at the rear. Capacity: crew tools + materials + small equipment. A 18×35 roll-up clears a box truck or a van with a roof rack.

💡 Pro tip:IBC Certified. Size affords: tool cage, material racking, site-power panel.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Contractor Storage Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Storage Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Storage Shop spec sheet.

Width18'
Length35' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Storage Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor storage shop
Everyday contractor storage shop
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor storage shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor storage shop + seasonal storage
contractor storage shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Contractor Storage Shop — what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$232/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 contractor storage shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $232/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Storage Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Contractor Storage Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Contractor Storage Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Storage Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Storage Shop also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →
🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Workshop →
🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →
🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →
🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →
🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Carport with Storage Room →
🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →
🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Toy Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Storage Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 contractor storage shop cost?

A 18×35 contractor storage shop from Steel and Stud starts at $11,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $232/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 contractor storage shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud contractor storage shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 contractor storage shop?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor storage shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 contractor storage shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 contractor storage shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 contractor storage shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $232/month on a 18×35 contractor storage shop.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 contractor storage shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 contractor storage shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 18×35 contractor storage shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Storage Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Matte graphite prefab metal building with monitor roof and white pickup truck at the bay

100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations | Steel and Stud, From $164,750

12

100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$187,800$164,750SAVE $23,050
or $3432/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×90Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations, built for daily backyard use.

100×90 delivers 9000 sq ft of everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations space. Multiple 100×90 roll-ups along the long wall keep crew mornings moving without bottlenecks at the door.

You’re viewing:Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$164,750$187,800Save $23,050
or as low as $3432/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$146,450
100×90
this size
$164,750
100×100
longer
$174,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $54,500
  • Vertical Roof
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-FLEET-GARAGE-VEHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. 100×90 delivers 9000 sq ft of everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations layout.

100×90 delivers 9000 sq ft of everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations space. Multiple 100×90 roll-ups along the long wall keep crew mornings moving without bottlenecks at the door.

💡 Pro tip:Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations works well at 100×90, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations spec sheet.

Width100′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage / vehicle operations
Everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage / vehicle operations.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
fleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations, what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3432/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3432/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations cost?

A 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations from Steel and Stud starts at $164,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3432/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3432/month on a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations typically adds $72,000–$108,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$164,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Matte graphite prefab metal building with monitor roof and white pickup truck at the bay

100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$164,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Manufacturing Facility

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Manufacturing Facility | Steel and Stud — From $167,000
12
100×90 Manufacturing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$190,400$167,000SAVE $23,400
or $3479/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Manufacturing Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Manufacturing Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Manufacturers configure a 100×90 PEMB as a light fabrication or assembly plant with overhead crane provisions and reinforced anchor points. The clear-span at 100 feet is what makes this size work — no interior columns.

You're viewing:Manufacturing Facility·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$167,000$190,400Save $23,400
or as low as $3479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,700
100×90
this size
$167,000
100×110
longer
$203,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Crane-Ready
  • IBC Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-MANUFACTURING-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fabrication-shop layout.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Manufacturers configure a 100×90 PEMB as a light fabrication or assembly plant with overhead crane provisions and reinforced anchor points.

Weld / fab bayMATERIAL STORAGEOffice / break100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · fabrication-shop layout

Weld / fab bay · Material storage · Office / break

Weld / fab bay at the front, material storage in the middle, office / break at the rear. The clear-span at 100 feet is what makes this size work — no interior columns to dodge with material flow.

💡 Pro tip:IBC Certified.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Manufacturing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing facility
Everyday manufacturing facility
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing facility + seasonal storage
manufacturing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Manufacturing Facility — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 manufacturing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Manufacturing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Manufacturing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 manufacturing facility cost?

A 100×90 manufacturing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $167,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 manufacturing facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud manufacturing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 manufacturing facility?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 manufacturing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 manufacturing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 manufacturing facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3479/month on a 100×90 manufacturing facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 manufacturing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 manufacturing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×90 manufacturing facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×90 manufacturing facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$167,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Manufacturing Facility

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Manufacturing Facility | Steel and Stud — From $167,000
12
100×90 Manufacturing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$190,400$167,000SAVE $23,400
or $3479/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Manufacturing Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Manufacturing Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Manufacturers configure a 100×90 PEMB as a light fabrication or assembly plant with overhead crane provisions and reinforced anchor points. The clear-span at 100 feet is what makes this size work — no interior columns.

You're viewing:Manufacturing Facility·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$167,000$190,400Save $23,400
or as low as $3479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,700
100×90
this size
$167,000
100×110
longer
$203,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Crane-Ready
  • IBC Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-MANUFACTURING-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fabrication-shop layout.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Manufacturers configure a 100×90 PEMB as a light fabrication or assembly plant with overhead crane provisions and reinforced anchor points.

Weld / fab bayMATERIAL STORAGEOffice / break100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · fabrication-shop layout

Weld / fab bay · Material storage · Office / break

Weld / fab bay at the front, material storage in the middle, office / break at the rear. The clear-span at 100 feet is what makes this size work — no interior columns to dodge with material flow.

💡 Pro tip:IBC Certified.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Manufacturing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing facility
Everyday manufacturing facility
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing facility + seasonal storage
manufacturing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Manufacturing Facility — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 manufacturing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Manufacturing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Manufacturing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 manufacturing facility cost?

A 100×90 manufacturing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $167,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 manufacturing facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud manufacturing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 manufacturing facility?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 manufacturing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 manufacturing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 manufacturing facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3479/month on a 100×90 manufacturing facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 manufacturing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 manufacturing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×90 manufacturing facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×90 manufacturing facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$167,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Distribution Center

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Distribution Center | Steel and Stud — From $166,600
12
100×90 Distribution Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$189,900$166,600SAVE $23,300
or $3471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Distribution Center
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Distribution Center, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Logistics operators use a 100×90 steel building as a regional distribution center with two dock-high roll-ups on the 90-foot wall and one drive-in on the gable. The 100-foot clear span lets you run cross-aisle pallet.

You're viewing:Distribution Center·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$166,600$189,900Save $23,300
or as low as $3471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,300
100×90
this size
$166,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Dock-High Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-DISTRIBUTION-CENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Logistics operators use a 100×90 steel building as a regional distribution center with two dock-high roll-ups on the 90-foot wall and one drive-in on the gable.

Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOFFICE MEZZANINE + BREAK + RESTROOMS100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~180 pallet positions, full forklift ops. The 100-foot clear span lets you run cross-aisle pallet racking five rows deep with a 12-foot drive lane, and 20-foot legs clear standard reach trucks.

💡 Pro tip:Dock-High Doors. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Distribution Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Center spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Center.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution center
Everyday distribution center
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution center + seasonal storage
distribution center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Distribution Center — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 distribution center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Distribution Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Distribution Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Center also viewed:

🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 distribution center cost?

A 100×90 distribution center from Steel and Stud starts at $166,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 distribution center price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud distribution center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 distribution center?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 distribution center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 distribution center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 distribution center without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3471/month on a 100×90 distribution center.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 distribution center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 distribution center in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×90 distribution center meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Distribution Center

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Distribution Center | Steel and Stud — From $166,600
12
100×90 Distribution Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$189,900$166,600SAVE $23,300
or $3471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Distribution Center
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Distribution Center, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Logistics operators use a 100×90 steel building as a regional distribution center with two dock-high roll-ups on the 90-foot wall and one drive-in on the gable. The 100-foot clear span lets you run cross-aisle pallet.

You're viewing:Distribution Center·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$166,600$189,900Save $23,300
or as low as $3471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,300
100×90
this size
$166,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Dock-High Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-DISTRIBUTION-CENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Logistics operators use a 100×90 steel building as a regional distribution center with two dock-high roll-ups on the 90-foot wall and one drive-in on the gable.

Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOFFICE MEZZANINE + BREAK + RESTROOMS100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~180 pallet positions, full forklift ops. The 100-foot clear span lets you run cross-aisle pallet racking five rows deep with a 12-foot drive lane, and 20-foot legs clear standard reach trucks.

💡 Pro tip:Dock-High Doors. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Distribution Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Center spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Center.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution center
Everyday distribution center
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution center + seasonal storage
distribution center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Distribution Center — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 distribution center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Distribution Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Distribution Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Center also viewed:

🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 distribution center cost?

A 100×90 distribution center from Steel and Stud starts at $166,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 distribution center price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud distribution center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 distribution center?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 distribution center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 distribution center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 distribution center without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3471/month on a 100×90 distribution center.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 distribution center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 distribution center in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×90 distribution center meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Commercial Workshop

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $166,600
12
100×90 Commercial Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$189,900$166,600SAVE $23,300
or $3471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Commercial Workshop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Commercial Workshop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Commercial real estate developers build a 100×90 commercial workshop as a multi-tenant flex space, typically divided into three or four bays with separate walk-ins. Each bay gets a 100×90 roll-up, a 100×90 storefront.

You're viewing:Commercial Workshop·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$166,600$189,900Save $23,300
or as low as $3471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,300
100×90
this size
$166,600
100×110
longer
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Multi-Bay Layout
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-COMMERCIAL-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Commercial real estate developers build a 100×90 commercial workshop as a multi-tenant flex space, typically divided into three or four bays with separate walk-ins.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Each bay gets a 100×90 roll-up, a 100×90 storefront window, and metered utilities.

💡 Pro tip:Wainscoting. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Commercial Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Workshop spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial workshop
Everyday commercial workshop
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial workshop + seasonal storage
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Commercial Workshop — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Commercial Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Commercial Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Workshop also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 commercial workshop cost?

A 100×90 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $166,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 commercial workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 commercial workshop?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 commercial workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 commercial workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 commercial workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3471/month on a 100×90 commercial workshop.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 commercial workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×90 commercial workshop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Commercial Workshop

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $166,600
12
100×90 Commercial Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$189,900$166,600SAVE $23,300
or $3471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Commercial Workshop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Commercial Workshop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Commercial real estate developers build a 100×90 commercial workshop as a multi-tenant flex space, typically divided into three or four bays with separate walk-ins. Each bay gets a 100×90 roll-up, a 100×90 storefront.

You're viewing:Commercial Workshop·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$166,600$189,900Save $23,300
or as low as $3471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,300
100×90
this size
$166,600
100×110
longer
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Multi-Bay Layout
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-COMMERCIAL-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Commercial real estate developers build a 100×90 commercial workshop as a multi-tenant flex space, typically divided into three or four bays with separate walk-ins.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Each bay gets a 100×90 roll-up, a 100×90 storefront window, and metered utilities.

💡 Pro tip:Wainscoting. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Commercial Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Workshop spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial workshop
Everyday commercial workshop
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial workshop + seasonal storage
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Commercial Workshop — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Commercial Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Commercial Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Workshop also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 commercial workshop cost?

A 100×90 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $166,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 commercial workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 commercial workshop?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 commercial workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 commercial workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 commercial workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3471/month on a 100×90 commercial workshop.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 commercial workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×90 commercial workshop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal carport with open bays covering an RV, pickup trucks, boat and tractor

100×90 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×90 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory | Steel and Stud, From $166,600

12

100×90 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$189,900$166,600SAVE $23,300
or $3471/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×90RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory fits 100-foot widths and 90-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Indoor inventory floor for Class A motorhomes, fifth wheels, travel trailers.

You’re viewing:RV / Boat Dealership Inventory·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$166,600$189,900Save $23,300
or as low as $3471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,300
100×90
this size
$166,600
100×100
longer
$176,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $62,000
  • Up to 20’+ Tall
  • Showroom Glazing
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-RV-BOAT-DEALERSHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Our 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory fits 100-foot widths and 90-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

RV BAYDaily Driver100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · tall walls

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory layout.

Our 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory fits 100-foot widths and 90-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Indoor inventory floor for Class A motorhomes, fifth wheels, travel trailers, marine boats, and recreational equipment. 18 to 20 feet of leg clearance accommodates the tallest fifth wheels with rooftop AC units.

💡 Pro tip:RV / Boat Dealership Inventory works well at 100×90, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory spec sheet.

Width100′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV / Boat Dealership Inventory.

DAILY USEEveryday rv / boat dealership inventory
Everyday rv / boat dealership inventory
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv / boat dealership inventory.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv / boat dealership inventory + seasonal storage
rv / boat dealership inventory + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory, what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV / Boat Dealership Inventory shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV / Boat Dealership Inventory also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory cost?

A 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory from Steel and Stud starts at $166,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv / boat dealership inventory ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv / boat dealership inventory different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3471/month on a 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×90 rv / boat dealership inventory meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal carport with open bays covering an RV, pickup trucks, boat and tractor

100×90 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building gym with navy roof, wainscot, and indoor turf entry

100×90 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×90 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports | Steel and Stud, From $164,750

12

100×90 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$187,800$164,750SAVE $23,050
or $3432/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×90Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports, built for hobby and recreational use.

Our 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports fits 100-foot widths and 90-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. 10,9000 sq ft accommodates a full basketball court with sideline.

You’re viewing:Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$164,750$187,800Save $23,050
or as low as $3432/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$146,450
100×90
this size
$164,750
100×100
longer
$174,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $58,000
  • Insulated
  • 20 Clear
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-ATHLETIC-FACILITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Our 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports fits 100-foot widths and 90-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑100′ × 90′ · 9,000 ground + loft

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports layout.

Our 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports fits 100-foot widths and 90-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. 10,9000 sq ft accommodates a full basketball court with sideline run-out, two practice fields for soccer or lacrosse, batting cages with overhead clearance, or a CrossFit-style training floor with rigs along the long wall.

💡 Pro tip:Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports works well at 100×90, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports spec sheet.

Width100′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports.

DAILY USEEveryday athletic facility / indoor sports
Everyday athletic facility / indoor sports
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a athletic facility / indoor sports.
STORAGE OVERFLOWathletic facility / indoor sports + seasonal storage
athletic facility / indoor sports + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports, what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3432/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3432/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports cost?

A 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports from Steel and Stud starts at $164,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3432/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud athletic facility / indoor sports ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud athletic facility / indoor sports different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3432/month on a 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 100×90 athletic facility / indoor sports for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a athletic facility / indoor sports to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$164,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building gym with navy roof, wainscot, and indoor turf entry

100×90 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$164,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Agricultural Metal Building

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Agricultural Metal Building | Steel and Stud — From $165,400
12
100×90 Agricultural Metal Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$188,550$165,400SAVE $23,150
or $3446/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Agricultural Metal Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Agricultural Metal Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

Agricultural-industrial operators run a 100×90 as a hay barn, equipment shed, or cattle handling facility. At 9,000 sq ft you store roughly 800 large round bales stacked three high or park a combine, two tractors, and a.

You're viewing:Agricultural Metal Building·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$165,400$188,550Save $23,150
or as low as $3446/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$147,100
100×90
this size
$165,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open-Side Option
  • 800 Bale Capacity
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-AGRICULTURAL-METBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your agricultural metal building layout.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Agricultural-industrial operators run a 100×90 as a hay barn, equipment shed, or cattle handling facility.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · agricultural metal building layout

Agricultural Metal Building layout.

Agricultural-industrial operators run a 100×90 as a hay barn, equipment shed, or cattle handling facility. At 9,000 sq ft you store roughly 800 large round bales stacked three high or park a combine, two tractors, and a sprayer with maintenance access. Open-side or partially enclosed configurations dominate this use.

💡 Pro tip:800 Bale Capacity.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Agricultural Metal Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Agricultural Metal Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Agricultural Metal Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Agricultural Metal Building.

DAILY USEEveryday agricultural metal building
Everyday agricultural metal building
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a agricultural metal building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWagricultural metal building + seasonal storage
agricultural metal building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Agricultural Metal Building — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3446/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 agricultural metal building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3446/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Agricultural Metal Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Agricultural Metal Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Agricultural Metal Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Agricultural Metal Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Agricultural Metal Building also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Riding Arena →
🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Agricultural Metal Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 agricultural metal building cost?

A 100×90 agricultural metal building from Steel and Stud starts at $165,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3446/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 agricultural metal building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud agricultural metal building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 agricultural metal building?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud agricultural metal building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 agricultural metal building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 agricultural metal building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 agricultural metal building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3446/month on a 100×90 agricultural metal building.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 agricultural metal building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 agricultural metal building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×90 agricultural metal building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Agricultural Metal Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$165,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Agricultural Metal Building

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Agricultural Metal Building | Steel and Stud — From $165,400
12
100×90 Agricultural Metal Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$188,550$165,400SAVE $23,150
or $3446/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Agricultural Metal Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Agricultural Metal Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

Agricultural-industrial operators run a 100×90 as a hay barn, equipment shed, or cattle handling facility. At 9,000 sq ft you store roughly 800 large round bales stacked three high or park a combine, two tractors, and a.

You're viewing:Agricultural Metal Building·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$165,400$188,550Save $23,150
or as low as $3446/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$147,100
100×90
this size
$165,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open-Side Option
  • 800 Bale Capacity
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-AGRICULTURAL-METBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your agricultural metal building layout.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Agricultural-industrial operators run a 100×90 as a hay barn, equipment shed, or cattle handling facility.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · agricultural metal building layout

Agricultural Metal Building layout.

Agricultural-industrial operators run a 100×90 as a hay barn, equipment shed, or cattle handling facility. At 9,000 sq ft you store roughly 800 large round bales stacked three high or park a combine, two tractors, and a sprayer with maintenance access. Open-side or partially enclosed configurations dominate this use.

💡 Pro tip:800 Bale Capacity.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Agricultural Metal Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Agricultural Metal Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Agricultural Metal Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Agricultural Metal Building.

DAILY USEEveryday agricultural metal building
Everyday agricultural metal building
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a agricultural metal building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWagricultural metal building + seasonal storage
agricultural metal building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Agricultural Metal Building — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3446/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 agricultural metal building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3446/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Agricultural Metal Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Agricultural Metal Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Agricultural Metal Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Agricultural Metal Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Agricultural Metal Building also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Riding Arena →
🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Agricultural Metal Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 agricultural metal building cost?

A 100×90 agricultural metal building from Steel and Stud starts at $165,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3446/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 agricultural metal building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud agricultural metal building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 agricultural metal building?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud agricultural metal building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 agricultural metal building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 agricultural metal building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 agricultural metal building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3446/month on a 100×90 agricultural metal building.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 agricultural metal building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 agricultural metal building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×90 agricultural metal building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Agricultural Metal Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$165,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Gray metal workshop with black wainscot and roll-up door under rocky peaks at dusk

18×26 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench | Steel and Stud, From $6,900

12

18×26 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,850$6,900SAVE $950
or $144/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench, built for daily backyard use.

Our 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners pick the 18×26 when a basic 18×26 feels cramped.

You’re viewing:Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,900$7,850Save $950
or as low as $144/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$6,900
18×28
longer
$7,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 9×8 Roll-Up Door
  • Fits Full-Size Truck
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-SINGLE-CAR-GARAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. Our 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench layout.

Our 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners pick the 18×26 when a basic 18×26 feels cramped and a 18×26 feels excessive. You park one full-size F-150 or SUV, then keep the back 8 feet for a workbench, tool wall, and a small parts shelf. Plenty of room to walk around the truck with the doors open.

💡 Pro tip:Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench.

DAILY USEEveryday single-car garage with workshop bench
Everyday single-car garage with workshop bench
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-car garage with workshop bench.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-car garage with workshop bench + seasonal storage
single-car garage with workshop bench + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$144/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $144/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench cost?

A 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench from Steel and Stud starts at $6,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $144/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-car garage with workshop bench ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-car garage with workshop bench different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $144/month on a 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench typically adds $3,744–$5,616 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Gray metal workshop with black wainscot and roll-up door under rocky peaks at dusk

18×26 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Silver metal workshop with black wainscoting and roll-up door below wooded bluffs

18×26 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists | Steel and Stud, From $6,900

12

18×26 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,850$6,900SAVE $950
or $144/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists? At 468 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Woodworkers, leather crafters, and small-engine hobbyists buy this size for a.

You’re viewing:Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,900$7,850Save $950
or as low as $144/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$6,900
18×28
longer
$7,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Hobbyist Favorite
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-BACKYARD-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. Looking for a 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists? At 468 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists layout.

Looking for a 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists? At 468 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Woodworkers, leather crafters, and small-engine hobbyists buy this size for a dedicated shop separate from the house. 468 sq ft handles a table saw, drill press, router table, dust collection, and a 6-foot workbench with shelving overhead. A 36-inch walk-in door keeps deliveries clean.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard workshop for hobbyists
Everyday backyard workshop for hobbyists
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard workshop for hobbyists.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard workshop for hobbyists + seasonal storage
backyard workshop for hobbyists + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$144/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $144/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists cost?

A 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists from Steel and Stud starts at $6,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $144/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard workshop for hobbyists ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard workshop for hobbyists different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $144/month on a 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists typically adds $3,744–$5,616 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Silver metal workshop with black wainscoting and roll-up door below wooded bluffs

18×26 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White commercial metal building with black roll-up door and windows by a mountain lake

18×26 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side | Steel and Stud, From $6,900

12

18×26 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,850$6,900SAVE $950
or $144/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side, built for daily backyard use.

Our 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Two compact sedans or a small SUV plus a sedan fit at 18 feet.

You’re viewing:Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,900$7,850Save $950
or as low as $144/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$6,900
18×28
longer
$7,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • 16′ Wide Roll-Up
  • Two-Car Capable
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-TWO-COMPACT-CARSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. Our 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side layout.

Our 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Two compact sedans or a small SUV plus a sedan fit at 18 feet wide if you’re careful with the doors. Most buyers pair this with a single 16-foot roll-up door for both bays. You won’t have room for storage along the walls, but you will get both cars under steel.

💡 Pro tip:Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side.

DAILY USEEveryday two compact cars tucked side-by-side
Everyday two compact cars tucked side-by-side
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two compact cars tucked side-by-side.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo compact cars tucked side-by-side + seasonal storage
two compact cars tucked side-by-side + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$144/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $144/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side cost?

A 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side from Steel and Stud starts at $6,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $144/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two compact cars tucked side-by-side ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two compact cars tucked side-by-side different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $144/month on a 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side typically adds $3,744–$5,616 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White commercial metal building with black roll-up door and windows by a mountain lake

18×26 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy commercial metal building office with glass storefront entry, stone wainscot, and parking lot

18×26 Home Office and Hobby Room

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Home Office and Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $6,900

12

18×26 Home Office and Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,850$6,900SAVE $950
or $144/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Home Office and Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Home Office and Hobby Room, built for daily backyard use.

Our 18×26 home office and hobby room fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Remote workers and small property owners convert the 18×26 into a fully.

You’re viewing:Home Office and Hobby Room·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,900$7,850Save $950
or as low as $144/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$6,900
18×28
longer
$7,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Mini-Split Ready
  • Detached Office
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-HOME-OFFICE-HOBBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 home office and hobby room.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. Our 18×26 home office and hobby room fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft

Home Office and Hobby Room layout.

Our 18×26 home office and hobby room fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Remote workers and small property owners convert the 18×26 into a fully insulated detached office. R-19 fiberglass batt insulation, a mini-split HVAC unit, and a partition wall give you a 18×26 office plus a 18×26 hobby space. Storefront windows let in natural light.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office and Hobby Room works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Home Office and Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office and Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office and Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office and Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday home office and hobby room
Everyday home office and hobby room
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office and hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office and hobby room + seasonal storage
home office and hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Home Office and Hobby Room, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$144/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 home office and hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $144/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office and Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Home Office and Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Home Office and Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office and Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office and Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office and Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 home office and hobby room cost?

A 18×26 home office and hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $6,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $144/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 home office and hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office and hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 home office and hobby room?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office and hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 home office and hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 home office and hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 home office and hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $144/month on a 18×26 home office and hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 home office and hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 home office and hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×26 home office and hobby room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×26 home office and hobby room typically adds $3,744–$5,616 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office and Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy commercial metal building office with glass storefront entry, stone wainscot, and parking lot

18×26 Home Office and Hobby Room

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Rust colored metal carport sheltering a pickup truck and UTV beside a mountain lake

18×26 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $7,550

12

18×26 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,600$7,550SAVE $1,050
or $157/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of rugged atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage space. Gardeners and rural property owners use the 18×26 as a dedicated equipment shed. You’ll fit a zero-turn mower, two ATVs, a small utility.

You’re viewing:ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,550$8,600Save $1,050
or as low as $157/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$7,550
18×28
longer
$8,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up Door
  • Gravel Anchors OK
  • Rural Workhorse
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-ATV-MOWER-LAWN-EBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. 18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of rugged atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft shop

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage layout.

18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of rugged atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage space. Gardeners and rural property owners use the 18×26 as a dedicated equipment shed. You’ll fit a zero-turn mower, two ATVs, a small utility trailer, plus shelving for fuel cans, blowers, trimmers, and chainsaws. A double-wide barn door makes loading and unloading fast.

💡 Pro tip:ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage
Everyday atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWatv, mower, and lawn equipment storage + seasonal storage
atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$157/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $157/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage cost?

A 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $7,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $157/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $157/month on a 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Rust colored metal carport sheltering a pickup truck and UTV beside a mountain lake

18×26 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue steel building workshop with open roll-up bay revealing a UTV, tool benches, and American flag

18×26 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage | Steel and Stud, From $7,550

12

18×26 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,600$7,550SAVE $1,050
or $157/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of rugged tractor shed with implement storage space. Small-farm owners pick the taller 12-14′ leg height to clear a compact tractor with a front-end loader raised. 468 sq ft holds the tractor.

You’re viewing:Tractor Shed with Implement Storage·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,550$8,600Save $1,050
or as low as $157/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$7,550
18×28
longer
$8,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • Tractor Clearance
  • Lean-To Compatible
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-TRACTOR-SHED-IMPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. 18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of rugged tractor shed with implement storage space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft shop

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage layout.

18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of rugged tractor shed with implement storage space. Small-farm owners pick the taller 12-14′ leg height to clear a compact tractor with a front-end loader raised. 468 sq ft holds the tractor plus a brush hog, box blade, and tiller along the back wall. Optional lean-to adds outdoor covered space for round bales.

💡 Pro tip:Tractor Shed with Implement Storage works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tractor Shed with Implement Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tractor Shed with Implement Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday tractor shed with implement storage
Everyday tractor shed with implement storage
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tractor shed with implement storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtractor shed with implement storage + seasonal storage
tractor shed with implement storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$157/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $157/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tractor Shed with Implement Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tractor Shed with Implement Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tractor Shed with Implement Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage cost?

A 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage from Steel and Stud starts at $7,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $157/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tractor shed with implement storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tractor shed with implement storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $157/month on a 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 18×26 tractor shed with implement storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Tractor Shed with Implement Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue steel building workshop with open roll-up bay revealing a UTV, tool benches, and American flag

18×26 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop auto detailing bay with black pickup truck on wet concrete

18×26 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom | Steel and Stud, From $6,900

12

18×26 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,850$6,900SAVE $950
or $144/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom, built for hobby and recreational use.

18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of hobby-ready collector car and motorcycle showroom space. The narrow 18′ width keeps the build affordable while the 28′ length leaves space for a lift, compressor, and tool chest behind the.

You’re viewing:Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,900$7,850Save $950
or as low as $144/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$6,900
18×28
longer
$7,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated Walls
  • Collector-Grade
  • Polished Concrete OK
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-COLLECTOR-CAR-MOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. 18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of hobby-ready collector car and motorcycle showroom space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom layout.

18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of hobby-ready collector car and motorcycle showroom space. The narrow 18′ width keeps the build affordable while the 28′ length leaves space for a lift, compressor, and tool chest behind the vehicle.

💡 Pro tip:Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday collector car and motorcycle showroom
Everyday collector car and motorcycle showroom
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a collector car and motorcycle showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcollector car and motorcycle showroom + seasonal storage
collector car and motorcycle showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$144/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $144/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom cost?

A 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $6,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $144/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud collector car and motorcycle showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud collector car and motorcycle showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $144/month on a 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a collector car and motorcycle showroom to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop auto detailing bay with black pickup truck on wet concrete

18×26 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel building retail storefront with large display windows on a gravel lot

18×26 Small Business Inventory Storage

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Small Business Inventory Storage | Steel and Stud, From $8,750

12

18×26 Small Business Inventory Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,000$8,750SAVE $1,250
or $182/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Small Business Inventory Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Small Business Inventory Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 18×26 small business inventory storage? At 468 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. E-commerce sellers and tradespeople buy the 18×26 as a dedicated stock room separate.

You’re viewing:Small Business Inventory Storage·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$8,750$10,000Save $1,250
or as low as $182/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$8,750
18×28
longer
$9,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • 12 Pallet Spots
  • 12′ Legs
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-SMALL-BUSINESS-IBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 small business inventory storage.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. Looking for a 18×26 small business inventory storage? At 468 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft

Small Business Inventory Storage layout.

Looking for a 18×26 small business inventory storage? At 468 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. E-commerce sellers and tradespeople buy the 18×26 as a dedicated stock room separate from the house. 468 sq ft holds 12 pallet positions on the floor or 24 with steel shelving. A 18×26 roll-up door clears a pallet jack and the height accepts standard 48-inch pallets stacked two-high.

💡 Pro tip:Small Business Inventory Storage works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Small Business Inventory Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Business Inventory Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Business Inventory Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Business Inventory Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday small business inventory storage
Everyday small business inventory storage
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small business inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall business inventory storage + seasonal storage
small business inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Small Business Inventory Storage, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$182/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 small business inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $182/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Business Inventory Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Small Business Inventory Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Small Business Inventory Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Business Inventory Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Business Inventory Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Business Inventory Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 small business inventory storage cost?

A 18×26 small business inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $8,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $182/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 small business inventory storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud small business inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 small business inventory storage?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small business inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 small business inventory storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 small business inventory storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 small business inventory storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $182/month on a 18×26 small business inventory storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 small business inventory storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 small business inventory storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 18×26 small business inventory storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Small Business Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$8,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel building retail storefront with large display windows on a gravel lot

18×26 Small Business Inventory Storage

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$8,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal barn with open equipment bay and black wainscot in fall countryside

18×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage | Steel and Stud, From $8,750

12

18×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,000$8,750SAVE $1,250
or $182/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Plumbing, electrical, and HVAC contractors use the 18×26 as a.

You’re viewing:Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$8,750$10,000Save $1,250
or as low as $182/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$8,750
18×28
longer
$9,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Theft-Resistant
  • Keypad Entry
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-CONTRACTOR-JOB-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. Our 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage layout.

Our 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Plumbing, electrical, and HVAC contractors use the 18×26 as a secure base for tools, fittings, copper, and conduit. The 12-gauge frame upgrade plus locking walk-in door and roll-up combo gives you fast load-in and theft resistance. Stamped drawings keep you compliant with county code.

💡 Pro tip:Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor job-site tool and material storage
Everyday contractor job-site tool and material storage
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor job-site tool and material storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor job-site tool and material storage + seasonal storage
contractor job-site tool and material storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$182/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $182/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage cost?

A 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage from Steel and Stud starts at $8,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $182/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor job-site tool and material storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor job-site tool and material storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $182/month on a 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$8,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal barn with open equipment bay and black wainscot in fall countryside

18×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$8,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel structure pool cabana with teal trim and french doors among tropical palms

18×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building | Steel and Stud, From $6,900

12

18×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,850$6,900SAVE $950
or $144/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building, built for hobby and recreational use.

Our 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Homeowners with pools convert the 18×26 into a.

You’re viewing:Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,900$7,850Save $950
or as low as $144/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$6,900
18×28
longer
$7,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • Pool House Layout
  • Partial Enclosure
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-POOL-HOUSE-OUTDOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. Our 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft ADU

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building layout.

Our 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Homeowners with pools convert the 18×26 into a finished pool house with changing area, bathroom rough-in, and covered lounge. Wainscoting in a contrasting color gives it residential curb appeal. The 28′ length lets you split it into a 10′ enclosed room plus an 18′ covered patio.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house and outdoor entertainment building
Everyday pool house and outdoor entertainment building
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house and outdoor entertainment building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house and outdoor entertainment building + seasonal storage
pool house and outdoor entertainment building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$144/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $144/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building cost?

A 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building from Steel and Stud starts at $6,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $144/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house and outdoor entertainment building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house and outdoor entertainment building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $144/month on a 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a pool house and outdoor entertainment building to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel structure pool cabana with teal trim and french doors among tropical palms

18×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red metal workshop with monitor roof, cream roll-up door and backyard garden beds

18×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo | Steel and Stud, From $6,900

12

18×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,850$6,900SAVE $950
or $144/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo, built for daily backyard use.

Our 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Gardeners pick the 18×26 with a partial enclosure to split it into.

You’re viewing:Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,900$7,850Save $950
or as low as $144/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$6,900
18×28
longer
$7,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • Skylight Panels
  • French Doors
  • Gardener Pick
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-GARDEN-SHED-GREEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. Our 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft shop

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo layout.

Our 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Gardeners pick the 18×26 with a partial enclosure to split it into a 18×26 enclosed potting and tool shed plus a 18×26 covered greenhouse zone with skylights. Add a French door between the spaces. R-13 insulation in the enclosed half keeps seedlings stable through shoulder seasons.

💡 Pro tip:Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo.

DAILY USEEveryday garden shed and greenhouse combo
Everyday garden shed and greenhouse combo
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garden shed and greenhouse combo.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarden shed and greenhouse combo + seasonal storage
garden shed and greenhouse combo + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$144/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $144/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo cost?

A 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo from Steel and Stud starts at $6,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $144/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garden shed and greenhouse combo ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garden shed and greenhouse combo different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $144/month on a 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo typically adds $3,744–$5,616 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red metal workshop with monitor roof, cream roll-up door and backyard garden beds

18×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sanctuary interior of a prefab metal building with timber trusses, wood pews, and cross

18×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage | Steel and Stud, From $8,850

12

18×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,100$8,850SAVE $1,250
or $184/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage, engineered to code for assembly use.

18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of public-use church, nonprofit, or community storage space. Small churches, scout troops, and nonprofits use the 18×26 to store folding chairs, tables, AV gear, and seasonal decorations. The.

You’re viewing:Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$8,850$10,100Save $1,250
or as low as $184/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$8,850
18×28
longer
$9,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • 140 MPH Rating
  • Code-Certified
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-CHURCH-NONPROFITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. 18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of public-use church, nonprofit, or community storage space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage layout.

18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of public-use church, nonprofit, or community storage space. Small churches, scout troops, and nonprofits use the 18×26 to store folding chairs, tables, AV gear, and seasonal decorations. The 12-gauge frame upgrade and 140 MPH wind rating handle exposed rural sites. A single roll-up door plus walk-in keeps daily access simple.

💡 Pro tip:Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday church, nonprofit, or community storage
Everyday church, nonprofit, or community storage
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a church, nonprofit, or community storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWchurch, nonprofit, or community storage + seasonal storage
church, nonprofit, or community storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$184/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $184/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage cost?

A 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage from Steel and Stud starts at $8,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $184/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud church, nonprofit, or community storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud church, nonprofit, or community storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $184/month on a 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$8,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sanctuary interior of a prefab metal building with timber trusses, wood pews, and cross

18×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$8,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black steel building warehouse with loading docks, box truck, and stacked pallets

100×125 Distribution Warehouse

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×125 Distribution Warehouse | Steel and Stud, From $230,650

12

100×125 Distribution Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$262,950$230,650SAVE $32,300
or $4805/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×125Distribution Warehouse

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×125 Distribution Warehouse, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×125 delivers 12500 sq ft of code-compliant distribution warehouse space. Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile distribution. The 100-foot clear span fits two 12-bay racking.

You’re viewing:Distribution Warehouse·Size100×125·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$230,650$262,950Save $32,300
or as low as $4805/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×125
100×125
this size
$230,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 24′ Eaves
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X125-DISTRIBUTION-WARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×125 distribution warehouse.

100 feet wide × 125 feet long. 100×125 delivers 12500 sq ft of code-compliant distribution warehouse space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 125′ · 12,500 sq ft

Distribution Warehouse layout.

100×125 delivers 12500 sq ft of code-compliant distribution warehouse space. Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile distribution. The 100-foot clear span fits two 12-bay racking aisles plus a turning lane for 53-foot trailers, and 24-foot eaves give you stack height for three pallets vertically. Add three dock-high roll-ups on the long wall for staged loading.

💡 Pro tip:Distribution Warehouse works well at 100×125, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×125 Distribution Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×125 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Warehouse spec sheet.

Width100′
Length125′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution warehouse
Everyday distribution warehouse
12,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution warehouse + seasonal storage
distribution warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×125 Distribution Warehouse, what makes it different.

12,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4805/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×125 distribution warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4805/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×125?

12,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 125′ footprint with 12,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $100,000–$150,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×125 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×125 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×125 Distribution Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×125 Distribution Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Warehouse · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×126×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$56,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Warehouse also viewed:

🏭 100×125

Manufacturing Facility

100×125 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×125

Commercial Workshop

100×125 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×125

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×125 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×125

Aircraft Hangar

100×125 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×125

Cold Storage Facility

100×125 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🎯 100×125

Indoor Riding Arena

100×125 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$228,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×125

Retail & Showroom

100×125 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×125

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×125 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×125

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×125 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×125

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×125 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×125

Self-Storage Facility

100×125 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 100×125 distribution warehouse cost?

A 100×125 distribution warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $230,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4805/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×125 distribution warehouse price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud distribution warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×125 distribution warehouse?

Almost always for 12,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×125 distribution warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×125 distribution warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×125 distribution warehouse without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4805/month on a 100×125 distribution warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 100×125 distribution warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×125 distribution warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×125 distribution warehouse meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$230,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black steel building warehouse with loading docks, box truck, and stacked pallets

100×125 Distribution Warehouse

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$230,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel building fabrication interior with five-ton overhead crane, welders, and plasma cutting table

100×125 Manufacturing Facility

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×125 Manufacturing Facility | Steel and Stud, From $231,050

12

100×125 Manufacturing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$263,400$231,050SAVE $32,350
or $4814/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×125Manufacturing Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×125 Manufacturing Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Our 100×125 manufacturing facility fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Manufacturers running CNC, metal fab, or assembly lines pick 100×125 to.

You’re viewing:Manufacturing Facility·Size100×125·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$231,050$263,400Save $32,350
or as low as $4814/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×125
100×120
smaller
$221,900
100×125
this size
$231,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 26 GA Walls
  • Crane-Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X125-MANUFACTURING-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×125 manufacturing facility.

100 feet wide × 125 feet long. Our 100×125 manufacturing facility fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 125′ · 12,500 sq ft

Manufacturing Facility layout.

Our 100×125 manufacturing facility fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Manufacturers running CNC, metal fab, or assembly lines pick 100×125 to floor a full production cell with QC, packout, and shipping under one roof. The clear-span design means no interior columns interrupting overhead crane runways. Spec 12-gauge framing and 26-gauge walls for the heavier internal loads.

💡 Pro tip:Manufacturing Facility works well at 100×125, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×125 Manufacturing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×125 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length125′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing facility
Everyday manufacturing facility
12,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing facility + seasonal storage
manufacturing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×125 Manufacturing Facility, what makes it different.

12,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4814/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×125 manufacturing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4814/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×125?

12,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 125′ footprint with 12,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $100,000–$150,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×125 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×125 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×125 Manufacturing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×125 Manufacturing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×126×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$56,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×125

Distribution Warehouse

100×125 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏢 100×125

Commercial Workshop

100×125 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×125

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×125 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×125

Aircraft Hangar

100×125 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×125

Cold Storage Facility

100×125 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🎯 100×125

Indoor Riding Arena

100×125 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$228,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×125

Retail & Showroom

100×125 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×125

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×125 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×125

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×125 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×125

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×125 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×125

Self-Storage Facility

100×125 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×125 manufacturing facility cost?

A 100×125 manufacturing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $231,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4814/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×125 manufacturing facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×125 manufacturing facility?

Almost always for 12,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×125 manufacturing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×125 manufacturing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×125 manufacturing facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4814/month on a 100×125 manufacturing facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×125 manufacturing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×125 manufacturing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×125 manufacturing facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×125 manufacturing facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$231,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel building fabrication interior with five-ton overhead crane, welders, and plasma cutting table

100×125 Manufacturing Facility

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$231,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Caramel metal workshop with black trim, windowed roll-up door and lit walk doors at sunset

100×125 Commercial Workshop

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×125 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $230,650

12

100×125 Commercial Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$262,950$230,650SAVE $32,300
or $4805/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×125Commercial Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×125 Commercial Workshop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 100×125 commercial workshop fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Multi-tenant commercial real estate developers split this footprint into four 100×125.

You’re viewing:Commercial Workshop·Size100×125·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$230,650$262,950Save $32,300
or as low as $4805/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×125
100×120
smaller
$221,500
100×125
this size
$230,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 4-Bay Layout
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X125-COMMERCIAL-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×125 commercial workshop.

100 feet wide × 125 feet long. Our 100×125 commercial workshop fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 125′ · 12,500 sq ft

Commercial Workshop layout.

Our 100×125 commercial workshop fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Multi-tenant commercial real estate developers split this footprint into four 100×125 bays, each with its own roll-up and walk-in door. It’s a proven layout for leasing to auto repair, welding, woodworking, and small fab shops. Pre-frame the partitions in the 3D builder so you can drop steel-stud walls later.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Workshop works well at 100×125, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×125 Commercial Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×125 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Workshop spec sheet.

Width100′
Length125′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial workshop
Everyday commercial workshop
12,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial workshop + seasonal storage
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×125 Commercial Workshop, what makes it different.

12,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4805/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×125 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4805/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×125?

12,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 125′ footprint with 12,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $100,000–$150,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×125 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×125 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×125 Commercial Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×125 Commercial Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×126×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$56,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Workshop also viewed:

🏢 100×125

Distribution Warehouse

100×125 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 100×125

Manufacturing Facility

100×125 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🌾 100×125

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×125 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×125

Aircraft Hangar

100×125 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×125

Cold Storage Facility

100×125 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🎯 100×125

Indoor Riding Arena

100×125 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$228,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×125

Retail & Showroom

100×125 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×125

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×125 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×125

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×125 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×125

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×125 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×125

Self-Storage Facility

100×125 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×125 commercial workshop cost?

A 100×125 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $230,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4805/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×125 commercial workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×125 commercial workshop?

Almost always for 12,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×125 commercial workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×125 commercial workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×125 commercial workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4805/month on a 100×125 commercial workshop.

What warranty comes with the 100×125 commercial workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×125 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×125 commercial workshop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$230,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Caramel metal workshop with black trim, windowed roll-up door and lit walk doors at sunset

100×125 Commercial Workshop

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$230,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building with open side bays holding a tractor, horse trailer and hay

100×125 Equipment & Hay Barn

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×125 Equipment & Hay Barn | Steel and Stud, From $229,450

12

100×125 Equipment & Hay Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$261,550$229,450SAVE $32,100
or $4780/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×125Equipment & Hay Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×125 Equipment & Hay Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

100×125 delivers 12500 sq ft of rugged equipment & hay barn space. Agricultural-industrial operators use this size to shelter combines, sprayers, and 1,000+ round bales in one structure. The 100-foot width clears two.

You’re viewing:Equipment & Hay Barn·Size100×125·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$229,450$261,550Save $32,100
or as low as $4780/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×125
100×125
this size
$229,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open Gable
  • Lean-To Add-On
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X125-EQUIPMENT-HAY-BABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×125 equipment & hay barn.

100 feet wide × 125 feet long. 100×125 delivers 12500 sq ft of rugged equipment & hay barn space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 125′ · 12,500 sq ft

Equipment & Hay Barn layout.

100×125 delivers 12500 sq ft of rugged equipment & hay barn space. Agricultural-industrial operators use this size to shelter combines, sprayers, and 1,000+ round bales in one structure. The 100-foot width clears two equipment lanes back-to-back, and an open gable end on the short wall lets you drive straight through. Add a 100×125 lean-to for tractors.

💡 Pro tip:Equipment & Hay Barn works well at 100×125, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×125 Equipment & Hay Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment & Hay Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×125 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment & Hay Barn spec sheet.

Width100′
Length125′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment & Hay Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment & hay barn
Everyday equipment & hay barn
12,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment & hay barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment & hay barn + seasonal storage
equipment & hay barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×125 Equipment & Hay Barn, what makes it different.

12,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4780/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×125 equipment & hay barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4780/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×125?

12,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 125′ footprint with 12,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $100,000–$150,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment & Hay Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×125 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×125 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×125 Equipment & Hay Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×125 Equipment & Hay Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment & Hay Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×126×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$56,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment & Hay Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×125

Distribution Warehouse

100×125 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 100×125

Manufacturing Facility

100×125 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×125

Commercial Workshop

100×125 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×125

Aircraft Hangar

100×125 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×125

Cold Storage Facility

100×125 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🎯 100×125

Indoor Riding Arena

100×125 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$228,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×125

Retail & Showroom

100×125 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×125

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×125 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×125

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×125 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×125

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×125 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×125

Self-Storage Facility

100×125 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment & Hay Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×125 equipment & hay barn cost?

A 100×125 equipment & hay barn from Steel and Stud starts at $229,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4780/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×125 equipment & hay barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×125 equipment & hay barn?

Almost always for 12,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×125 equipment & hay barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×125 equipment & hay barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×125 equipment & hay barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4780/month on a 100×125 equipment & hay barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×125 equipment & hay barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×125 equipment & hay barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×125 equipment & hay barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment & Hay Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$229,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building with open side bays holding a tractor, horse trailer and hay

100×125 Equipment & Hay Barn

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$229,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green prefab metal building with lit loading docks and trucks at dawn

100×125 Aircraft Hangar

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×125 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud, From $230,650

12

100×125 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$262,950$230,650SAVE $32,300
or $4805/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×125Aircraft Hangar

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×125 Aircraft Hangar, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 100×125 aircraft hangar fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Private operators hangar light twins, turboprops, and small jets in this footprint. The.

You’re viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size100×125·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$230,650$262,950Save $32,300
or as low as $4805/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×125
100×120
smaller
$221,500
100×125
this size
$230,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Bifold Door
  • 24′ Eaves
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X125-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×125 aircraft hangar.

100 feet wide × 125 feet long. Our 100×125 aircraft hangar fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑100′ × 125′ · 12,500 ground + loft

Aircraft Hangar layout.

Our 100×125 aircraft hangar fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Private operators hangar light twins, turboprops, and small jets in this footprint. The 100-foot opening accommodates a King Air or Citation wingspan, and a hydraulic bifold door across the gable end gives you full clearance. Engineering for FAA wind exposure and tail clearance is built into the stamped drawings.

💡 Pro tip:Aircraft Hangar works well at 100×125, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×125 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×125 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width100′
Length125′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
12,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×125 Aircraft Hangar, what makes it different.

12,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4805/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×125 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4805/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×125?

12,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 125′ footprint with 12,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $100,000–$150,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×125 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×125 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×125 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×125 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Aircraft Hangar · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×126×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$56,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 100×125

Distribution Warehouse

100×125 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 100×125

Manufacturing Facility

100×125 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×125

Commercial Workshop

100×125 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×125

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×125 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏭 100×125

Cold Storage Facility

100×125 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🎯 100×125

Indoor Riding Arena

100×125 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$228,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×125

Retail & Showroom

100×125 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×125

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×125 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×125

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×125 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×125

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×125 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×125

Self-Storage Facility

100×125 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 100×125 aircraft hangar cost?

A 100×125 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $230,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4805/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×125 aircraft hangar price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×125 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 12,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×125 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×125 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×125 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4805/month on a 100×125 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 100×125 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×125 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×125 aircraft hangar meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$230,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green prefab metal building with lit loading docks and trucks at dawn

100×125 Aircraft Hangar

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$230,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building warehouse with red roll-up doors and a skid steer parked at sunset

100×125 Cold Storage Facility

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×125 Cold Storage Facility | Steel and Stud, From $231,050

12

100×125 Cold Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$263,400$231,050SAVE $32,350
or $4814/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×125Cold Storage Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×125 Cold Storage Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Looking for a 100×125 cold storage facility? At 12500 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Food distributors and produce operators spec insulated metal panels (IMPs) on this.

You’re viewing:Cold Storage Facility·Size100×125·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$231,050$263,400Save $32,350
or as low as $4814/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×125
100×125
this size
$231,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • IMP Walls
  • Vapor-Sealed
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X125-COLD-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×125 cold storage facility.

100 feet wide × 125 feet long. Looking for a 100×125 cold storage facility? At 12500 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack100′ × 125′ · 12,500 sq ft shop

Cold Storage Facility layout.

Looking for a 100×125 cold storage facility? At 12500 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Food distributors and produce operators spec insulated metal panels (IMPs) on this footprint for refrigerated and freezer storage. The 12,12500 sq ft floor splits into a 36°F cooler and a -10°F freezer with a shared loading vestibule. R-30+ panels and vapor-sealed seams are configured during the customize step.

💡 Pro tip:Cold Storage Facility works well at 100×125, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×125 Cold Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×125 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length125′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage facility
Everyday cold storage facility
12,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage facility + seasonal storage
cold storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×125 Cold Storage Facility, what makes it different.

12,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4814/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×125 cold storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4814/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×125?

12,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 125′ footprint with 12,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $100,000–$150,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×125 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×125 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×125 Cold Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×125 Cold Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×126×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$56,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×125

Distribution Warehouse

100×125 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 100×125

Manufacturing Facility

100×125 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×125

Commercial Workshop

100×125 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×125

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×125 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×125

Aircraft Hangar

100×125 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🎯 100×125

Indoor Riding Arena

100×125 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$228,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×125

Retail & Showroom

100×125 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×125

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×125 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×125

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×125 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×125

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×125 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×125

Self-Storage Facility

100×125 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×125 cold storage facility cost?

A 100×125 cold storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $231,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4814/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×125 cold storage facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud cold storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×125 cold storage facility?

Almost always for 12,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×125 cold storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×125 cold storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×125 cold storage facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4814/month on a 100×125 cold storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×125 cold storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×125 cold storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×125 cold storage facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×125 cold storage facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$231,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building warehouse with red roll-up doors and a skid steer parked at sunset

100×125 Cold Storage Facility

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$231,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel barn interior aisle with wooden horse stalls, timber trusses, and a curious horse

100×125 Indoor Riding Arena

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×125 Indoor Riding Arena | Steel and Stud, From $228,800

12

100×125 Indoor Riding Arena
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$260,850$228,800SAVE $32,050
or $4767/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×125Indoor Riding Arena

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×125 Indoor Riding Arena, built for hobby and recreational use.

100×125 delivers 12500 sq ft of hobby-ready indoor riding arena space. Equestrian operators choose 100×125 for a full dressage court (66’x132′ fits with safe wall clearance trimmed) or a barrel-racing pattern. The.

You’re viewing:Indoor Riding Arena·Size100×125·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$228,800$260,850Save $32,050
or as low as $4767/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×125
100×120
smaller
$219,650
100×125
this size
$228,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Clear Span
  • Kick-Wall Wainscot
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X125-INDOOR-RIDING-ARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×125 indoor riding arena.

100 feet wide × 125 feet long. 100×125 delivers 12500 sq ft of hobby-ready indoor riding arena space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑100′ × 125′ · 12,500 ground + loft

Indoor Riding Arena layout.

100×125 delivers 12500 sq ft of hobby-ready indoor riding arena space. Equestrian operators choose 100×125 for a full dressage court (66’x132′ fits with safe wall clearance trimmed) or a barrel-racing pattern. The clear-span eliminates interior posts that spook horses, and 16-foot eaves give you working clearance for a mounted rider plus roof framing.

💡 Pro tip:Indoor Riding Arena works well at 100×125, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×125 Indoor Riding Arena in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Riding Arena.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×125 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Riding Arena spec sheet.

Width100′
Length125′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Riding Arena.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor riding arena
Everyday indoor riding arena
12,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor riding arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor riding arena + seasonal storage
indoor riding arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×125 Indoor Riding Arena, what makes it different.

12,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4767/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×125 indoor riding arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4767/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×125?

12,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 125′ footprint with 12,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $100,000–$150,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Riding Arena shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×125 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×125 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×125 Indoor Riding Arena buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×125 Indoor Riding Arena

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Riding Arena · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×126×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$56,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Riding Arena also viewed:

🏢 100×125

Distribution Warehouse

100×125 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 100×125

Manufacturing Facility

100×125 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×125

Commercial Workshop

100×125 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×125

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×125 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×125

Aircraft Hangar

100×125 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×125

Cold Storage Facility

100×125 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🏢 100×125

Retail & Showroom

100×125 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×125

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×125 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×125

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×125 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×125

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×125 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×125

Self-Storage Facility

100×125 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Riding Arena questions, answered.

How much does a 100×125 indoor riding arena cost?

A 100×125 indoor riding arena from Steel and Stud starts at $228,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4767/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×125 indoor riding arena price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud indoor riding arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×125 indoor riding arena?

Almost always for 12,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor riding arena different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×125 indoor riding arena need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×125 indoor riding arena delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×125 indoor riding arena without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4767/month on a 100×125 indoor riding arena.

What warranty comes with the 100×125 indoor riding arena?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×125 indoor riding arena in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 100×125 indoor riding arena for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a indoor riding arena to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Riding Arena quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$228,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel barn interior aisle with wooden horse stalls, timber trusses, and a curious horse

100×125 Indoor Riding Arena

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$228,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building shop with glass gable storefront glowing at golden hour as shoppers enter

100×125 Retail & Showroom

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×125 Retail & Showroom | Steel and Stud, From $230,650

12

100×125 Retail & Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$262,950$230,650SAVE $32,300
or $4805/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×125Retail & Showroom

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×125 Retail & Showroom, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 100×125 retail & showroom fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to.

You’re viewing:Retail & Showroom·Size100×125·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$230,650$262,950Save $32,300
or as low as $4805/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×125
100×125
this size
$230,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Storefront Glass
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X125-RETAIL-SHOWROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×125 retail & showroom.

100 feet wide × 125 feet long. Our 100×125 retail & showroom fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE100′ × 125′ · 12,500 sq ft

Retail & Showroom layout.

Our 100×125 retail & showroom fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service write-up area. Storefront glazing across one long wall, two 100×125 roll-ups for vehicle moves, and wainscoting on the lower 4 feet give it curb appeal.

💡 Pro tip:Retail & Showroom works well at 100×125, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×125 Retail & Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Retail & Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×125 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Retail & Showroom spec sheet.

Width100′
Length125′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Retail & Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday retail & showroom
Everyday retail & showroom
12,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail & showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWretail & showroom + seasonal storage
retail & showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×125 Retail & Showroom, what makes it different.

12,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4805/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×125 retail & showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4805/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×125?

12,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 125′ footprint with 12,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $100,000–$150,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Retail & Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×125 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×125 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×125 Retail & Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×125 Retail & Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Retail & Showroom · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×126×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$56,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Retail & Showroom also viewed:

🏢 100×125

Distribution Warehouse

100×125 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 100×125

Manufacturing Facility

100×125 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×125

Commercial Workshop

100×125 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×125

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×125 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×125

Aircraft Hangar

100×125 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×125

Cold Storage Facility

100×125 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🎯 100×125

Indoor Riding Arena

100×125 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$228,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏭 100×125

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×125 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×125

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×125 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×125

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×125 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×125

Self-Storage Facility

100×125 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Retail & Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 100×125 retail & showroom cost?

A 100×125 retail & showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $230,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4805/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×125 retail & showroom price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud retail & showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×125 retail & showroom?

Almost always for 12,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud retail & showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×125 retail & showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×125 retail & showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×125 retail & showroom without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4805/month on a 100×125 retail & showroom.

What warranty comes with the 100×125 retail & showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×125 retail & showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×125 retail & showroom meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Retail & Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$230,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building shop with glass gable storefront glowing at golden hour as shoppers enter

100×125 Retail & Showroom

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$230,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

Need a custom size?

Order custom metal buildings in any width and length through Steel And Stud. Request metal building pricing or start your steel building design in 3D.

Instant Estimate

Commercial Metal Buildings Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

Why Work With Steel And Stud

Your Commercial Metal Building Dealer and Steel Building Contractor

Steel And Stud is a full-service commercial building contractor and metal building dealer. From metal building pricing and steel building design to professional steel building installation, we manage your entire project. One point of contact, one fixed price.

🏭

Clear-Span Steel Structures for Commercial Use

Column-free interiors from 30 to 100+ feet wide. Steel structures for commercial properties including warehouses, retail showrooms, truck bays, racking systems and open floor plans for any business application.

📑

Permit-Ready Engineered Plans

Every commercial building order includes state-specific stamped drawings and foundation calculations engineered to your local building code. Submit directly to your permit office.

🚀

Fast Project Completion

Most Steel And Stud commercial metal building projects go from order to operational in 4 to 12 weeks. On-site installation typically takes 1 to 5 days with our certified contractor crews.

🛡

Durable Commercial-Grade Steel

Galvanized steel framing with 20-year structural warranty on 12-gauge. Powder-coated panels in 17 colors resist rust, fire and termites. Built for decades of commercial use.

💰

Dealer-Direct Metal Building Pricing

As your dedicated Steel And Stud dealer, you get metal building pricing without middleman markups. Commercial building packages priced 30 to 50% below traditional metal building construction costs. Request pricing anytime.

🎯

Custom Steel Building Design Options

Choose any width and length to order custom metal buildings sized to your project. Add roll-up doors, walk-in entries, storefront windows, insulation, lean-tos, mezzanines and wainscot finishes. Complete steel building design flexibility from your Steel And Stud dealer.

Compare Commercial Building Packages

Standard vs Deluxe vs Custom Commercial Buildings

Steel And Stud offers three commercial building packages. Compare metal building pricing, included features and steel building design options below. Choose the right package, then request a quote from your Steel And Stud dealer.

 

Standard Commercial

Starting from $26,485 installed

Vertical roof and wall panels
14-gauge or 12-gauge galvanized steel framing
Eave heights from 12 to 16 feet
Free delivery and professional installation included
Wainscot available as upgrade

Custom Commercial

Any size, quote-based

Any width and length based on project needs
Eave heights up to 24 feet, custom roof pitch
Red iron I-beam framing for wide clear spans
Lean-tos, mezzanines, dock access and custom layouts
Steel And Stud provides quotes within 24 hours
Customer Reviews

What Business Owners Say About Steel And Stud

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their Commercial Metal Buildings.

★★★★★
4.8 / 5.0 from 2,847 verified reviews
★★★★★

"I needed a large, tall carport to protect my camping trailer in the Texas Panhandle. Bill was patient and very thorough. Three years later, after 80 mph winds collapsed it, Bill stayed in touch the whole way through the rebuild — even after warranty. No one is more customer-friendly."

RM
Ricardo M.
Phoenix, AZ
60x60x16 Commercial Building
★★★★★

"Bill is a hard charger when it comes to customer service. I was amazed how quickly he returned my emails and phone calls, and followed up with the installation from start to finish. Highly recommend."

DK
Diane K.
Charlotte, NC
40x100x14 Commercial Warehouse
★★★★☆

"Steel And Stud helped us plan and install a 50x50x16 Deluxe commercial building for our retail showroom. The wainscot and premium trim give it a professional look that impresses customers. Storefront windows and entry doors were pre-framed at the design stage so installation went smoothly. Looks like a project that cost twice what we paid."

TS
Trevor S.
Boise, ID
50x50x16 Deluxe Commercial Building
Frequently Asked Questions

Commercial Metal Building Buyer FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Steel And Stud commercial metal building pricing starts from $26,485 installed for a 36x40x14 Standard package. Mid-range options like the 40x100x14 warehouse start from $54,890. Deluxe commercial buildings with wainscot start from $36,825. All prices shown are starting estimates and may vary based on your location, building codes, customization and project specifications. Final pricing is provided in your written quote. Custom sizes in any width and length are available.

Yes. Steel And Stud provides commercial metal buildings in any custom width and length based on your project requirements. Widths range from 20 to over 100 feet. Lengths extend up to 300 feet. Eave heights are configurable from 12 to 24 feet. Choose from the pre-configured sizes on this page or share your custom dimensions and a Steel And Stud specialist will quote it within 24 hours.

Steel And Stud is a full-service commercial metal building dealer and steel building contractor. We partner with trusted production facilities to source pre-engineered steel buildings, then manage your entire project from planning and customization through delivery and professional steel building installation. This dealer-contractor approach gives you one point of contact from metal building pricing to completed metal building construction.

Yes. Steel And Stud is both a metal building dealer and a steel building contractor. Our certified crews handle professional steel building installation of commercial metal buildings across all 48 contiguous states. Most tubular steel buildings are installed in 1 to 5 days. Delivery and installation are included on standard orders.

Three ways to get metal building pricing and plan your project: (1) Submit a free quote request with your project details for a written commercial steel building quote within one business day. (2) Use the 3D building designer to configure steel building design options with live pricing. (3) Call 1-877-275-7048 to speak with a Steel And Stud dealer specialist.

Steel And Stud offers commercial metal buildings in any size. Pre-configured packages include 36x40, 40x50, 40x100, 50x50 and 60x60 in both Standard and Deluxe series. Custom sizes are available in any width from 20 to 100+ feet and any length up to 300 feet, with eave heights from 12 to 24 feet. There are no fixed size limitations. Tell us your project dimensions and we will price it.

Steel And Stud provides metal buildings for business use across every industry: metal warehouse buildings, commercial storage buildings, metal shop buildings for auto and truck repair, metal retail buildings, steel office buildings, metal workshop buildings for fabrication, metal garage buildings, industrial metal buildings for manufacturing, and steel structures for commercial properties including fitness centers, churches, restaurants, aviation hangars and agricultural operations. Any business that needs a durable commercial metal structure can work with Steel And Stud as their dealer and steel building contractor.

Standard Commercial Buildings feature vertical roof and wall panels with base trim, available with eave heights from 12 to 16 feet. Best for warehouses, workshops, storage and back-of-house operations. Deluxe Commercial Buildings include two-tone wainscot, premium trim, extended eave heights and pre-framed openings for storefront windows. Best for retail, office, restaurant, fitness and customer-facing commercial spaces. Both series are available in any custom size.

Yes. Steel And Stud offers three payment options for commercial metal building projects: Standard payment with deposit at order and balance after installation, monthly financing starting from $109/mo with terms from 12 to 84 months, and rent-to-own starting from $89/mo with no credit check required.

Most Steel And Stud commercial metal building projects are completed in 4 to 12 weeks from order to operational. On-site installation by our contractor crews typically takes 1 to 5 days for tubular steel structures. Larger red iron projects may take longer based on engineering and production requirements.

Yes. Every Steel And Stud commercial steel building is engineered to meet the specific snow, wind and seismic requirements for your installation location. Each order includes stamped engineered drawings and foundation calculations ready for permit submission. Steel And Stud handles engineering as part of our full-service metal building construction and commercial building contractor support.

Get Your Free Quote

Request Commercial Metal Building Pricing

Looking for a metal building dealer near me or a commercial building contractor near me? Steel And Stud serves all 48 states. Share your project details and our commercial building contractor team will return a written quote with metal building pricing within one business day.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Commercial Metal Buildings From Steel And Stud

Steel And Stud is a full-service commercial metal building dealer and steel building contractor working with business owners across all 48 contiguous states. We help you scope the project, source the right pre-engineered steel building, customize the layout, manage engineering and permitting, and complete professional installation through certified contractor crews. The result is a single accountable partner from your first conversation through the final walk-through, instead of a chain of separate vendors managing different parts of the same job.

Custom Commercial Steel Buildings in Any Width and Length

Every commercial metal building Steel And Stud delivers is sized to the project, not pulled from a fixed catalog. Widths run from roughly 20 feet on tubular framing to over 100 feet on red iron I-beam, with lengths reaching 300 feet and eave heights set anywhere from 12 to 24 feet. The pre-configured options on this page (36x40, 40x50, 40x100, 50x50, 60x60 and Deluxe variants) are popular starting points, but if your operation needs a 45x80 metal warehouse building, a 38x140 distribution center, or a 55x55 steel office building with a 20-foot eave for a mezzanine, that is the size you order. Sizing decisions follow your floor plan, racking layout, vehicle clearance, equipment height and zoning requirements, not a preset list.

Commercial Applications We Build For

Steel And Stud commercial steel buildings serve a wide cross-section of business types. Warehouse operators and 3PL providers use clear-span metal warehouse buildings to maximize racking capacity and forklift movement. Auto and truck repair shops select tall-eave steel shop buildings with multi-bay roll-up doors that clear two-post lifts and service trucks. Retailers, dealerships and showroom operators choose Deluxe commercial buildings with wainscot and storefront window openings to project a polished, customer-facing exterior. Light manufacturers, fabrication shops and contractor yards run their operations out of metal workshop buildings sized for welding tables, machine tools and equipment staging.

Beyond those core uses, churches and event venues install wide clear-span steel structures for sanctuaries and fellowship halls; fitness operators and indoor sports facilities use tall-eave commercial buildings for courts, CrossFit boxes and batting cages; agricultural businesses build packing sheds and farm-retail commercial space; aviation operators install steel hangars for general aviation aircraft and helicopters; and self-storage developers partition long commercial buildings into rentable units. Whatever your business does inside the building, the building is engineered around it.

How to Get Pricing and Start Your Project

The fastest path to accurate metal building pricing is a written quote. Submit your approximate dimensions, intended use and installation address through the free quote form and a Steel And Stud commercial building specialist returns a detailed written quote within one business day. The quote reflects your specific width and length, eave height, framing gauge, door and window selections, insulation package, finish choices and the snow, wind and seismic requirements at your installation location. There is no obligation, no pressure, and you are free to compare and adjust before placing the order.

If you prefer to explore configurations visually first, the 3D building designer lets you set dimensions, add doors and windows, change finishes and see live pricing as you adjust. Or call 1-877-275-7048 to reach a specialist directly. However you start, the goal is project-level numbers fast enough to move on real timelines.

Standard, Deluxe and Custom Building Packages

Steel And Stud delivers three commercial building package tiers. Standard Commercial Buildings are the workhorse choice for warehouses, workshops, contractor yards, mini-storage and back-of-house operations where function takes priority over facade. They include vertical roof and wall panels, galvanized steel framing in 14-gauge or 12-gauge, eave heights from 12 to 16 feet, free delivery and professional installation, with starting prices from $26,485 installed.

Deluxe Commercial Buildings are designed for customer-facing applications where exterior appearance matters: retail stores, restaurants, professional offices, fitness centers, auto dealerships and worship halls. The Deluxe package adds a two-tone wainscot exterior, premium gable and corner trim, extended eave heights up to 18 feet and pre-framed openings ready for storefront windows, additional doors and ADA-compliant entries. Starting prices begin at $36,825 installed.

Custom Commercial Buildings cover everything the Standard and Deluxe packages do not. Red iron I-beam clear spans up to 100 feet, eave heights above 18 feet, mezzanine levels, lean-tos on multiple sides, dock-leveler-ready loading bays, custom roof pitches and specialized door layouts are quoted individually based on your engineering and site requirements. There is no dimension or feature Steel And Stud cannot accommodate as a custom project.

Steel Building Design and Configuration Options

Customization happens at the design stage, before your building enters production, so installation runs without surprises. Door options span sectional roll-up garage doors from 8x8 up to 16x16 for vehicle bays and equipment access, commercial walk-in doors for daily foot traffic, and storefront entry systems with pre-framed openings for customer-facing builds. Window openings can be placed on any wall and sized to match retail visibility, office natural light or warehouse ventilation needs. Insulation runs from R-13 for moderate climate buffering up to R-30 for fully conditioned commercial interiors with HVAC.

Beyond doors, windows and insulation, you can add lean-to canopies on any side for covered loading or outdoor work, mezzanine levels to add usable square footage without expanding the footprint, interior partition walls for offices or partitioned storage, dock-height openings for trailer loading, and pre-engineered HVAC penetrations. Exterior color is selected from 17 panel options, applied independently across roof, walls, trim and (on Deluxe builds) wainscot, so the finished commercial steel building reflects your brand or fits the surrounding architecture.

Engineering, Permitting and Code Compliance

Every commercial metal building Steel And Stud delivers is engineered for the specific snow, wind and seismic loads at your installation address, with stamped drawings and foundation calculations included in every order ready for permit submission. Engineering is handled in-house as part of standard service, so there is no need to hire a separate structural engineer or coordinate stamps from multiple parties. The package covers what your local building department requires for commercial permits, including ground snow load, basic wind speed, exposure category and seismic risk category specific to your zip code.

Professional Installation by Certified Steel And Stud Contractor Crews

Once the permit is approved and your site is prepared, Steel And Stud contractor crews arrive to complete the steel building installation on your schedule. Most tubular steel commercial buildings reach a weather-tight, fully erected state in one to five days on site, depending on dimensions and configuration. Larger red iron I-beam projects with custom features run longer based on span width, mezzanine work and specialized openings. The typical timeline from order placement to a fully operational commercial metal building is four to twelve weeks, against four to nine months for stick-built or block construction of equivalent square footage. You pay your deposit at order and the balance after the completed walk-through.

Commercial Metal Building Pricing and What Drives Cost

Pricing on a commercial metal building moves with the build. Two structures with the same dimensions can quote very differently once you factor in framing gauge, eave height, the snow and wind loads at the site, door and window count, insulation depth, finish package, lean-to additions, mezzanine work and any custom engineering. A 36x40x14 with three roll-up doors, a walk-in entry, R-19 insulation and a 14-foot lean-to is a different building from a 36x40x14 in base configuration, even though the dimensions match. Your written quote from Steel And Stud reflects the building you are actually ordering, with starting prices serving as a baseline rather than a final number.

Financing, Rent-to-Own and Section 179

Three payment paths are available for every commercial metal building project. Standard payment splits the total into a deposit at order and the balance after installation, which delivers the lowest total cost. Monthly financing starts from $109 per month with terms from 12 to 84 months and a soft credit pull. Rent-to-own starts from $89 per month, requires no credit check, and transfers ownership at the end of a 24 to 60 month term. Business buyers may also qualify for Section 179 deductions, which can allow a full first-year deduction on qualifying commercial metal building purchases.

Service Coverage Across All 48 States

Steel And Stud delivers and installs commercial metal buildings throughout the lower 48. Coverage extends to every state, but each project is engineered and permitted around the codes, snow and wind loads, and inspection processes of your specific installation address. Business owners working with a metal building dealer near them or hiring a commercial building contractor in their state get the same Steel And Stud team and the same dealer-direct pricing, with a project specialist who knows the local permit office and matches the build to your jurisdiction.

Why Buyers Choose Steel And Stud

The dealer-contractor model condenses what would normally be three or four separate vendor relationships into one. Instead of negotiating with a manufacturer, contracting an erector, hiring a structural engineer and managing freight separately, you place a single order with Steel And Stud and receive an engineered, delivered, installed commercial steel building under one fixed quote. There is no general contractor markup added to the chain, no broker margin built into freight, and no finger-pointing between vendors when something needs adjusting. Steel And Stud has served commercial customers since 2004, holds an A+ BBB rating, and carries over 2,800 verified buyer reviews averaging 4.8 stars across project sizes from small workshops to multi-acre distribution facilities.

Start Your Commercial Steel Building Project Today

Ready to plan your project? Submit a free quote request, configure your build in the 3D designer, or call 1-877-275-7048. A Steel And Stud specialist will return your written commercial steel building quote within one business day, walk you through customization options, line up financing if needed, and schedule professional installation once the project is locked in.

Related Steel And Stud Building Categories

Outside of commercial metal buildings, Steel And Stud also operates as a dealer and contractor for residential and agricultural structures including steel garages, metal barns, metal carports, RV covers and barndominiums. Steel building materials such as purlins, girts, standing seam roofing and insulated metal panels are also available for self-build and material-only projects.

Buy Commercial Metal Buildings From Steel And Stud

Dealer-direct metal building pricing starting from $26,485 installed. All prices are starting estimates. Custom sizes in any width and length. Professional steel building installation by our commercial building contractor team across 48 states. Get a free quote or call your nearest Steel And Stud commercial building contractor to plan your project today.

View Cart